‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪IM001 :‬‬‫ﺷﻜﺮًﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗ ﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏ ﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣ ﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬.‫ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

Information for Your Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONSWhen using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always befollowed, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave
flash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined byqualified service personnel.
• Let flash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly cancause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause arisk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬.‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬

%
v
AR 2

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ‪12 .................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪33 .......................... (M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪33 ............................ (TIME/BULB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ‪34 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪35 .....‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪13 ..........................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪36 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪37 ..................(n‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪15 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)‪38 ................(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪14 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪16 .............................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪17 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪18 ...............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪18 ..................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪19 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪20 ................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪22 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫)‪22 ......................................(A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪24 ........ (SCN‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪26 .........(ART‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪28 .......(J) PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪30 ................... (P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪31 .............. (A‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪32 ..................... (S‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ "‪39 ........................... "My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪40 ........................."My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪42 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪44 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪44 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ‪45 .......................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪46 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪46 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪47 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫)‪48 ........................(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪49 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪50 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‪50 ........................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪51 ................................. ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪52 .........‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪53 ........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪54 ...‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪56 ...........‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪56 .................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪57 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪58 .............‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪60 ......................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪61 ...........‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪62 .....................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪62 ......................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪64‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪64 ..........‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪64 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪65 .......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪66 ............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪67 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪67 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪68 ................................‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪69 .................................‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪69 ..................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪69 ...................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫)‪70 ........................... (Share Order‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪،[Erase Selected] ،[0‬‬‫]‪70 ........... ([Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪70 ................................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪My Clips‬‬‫)‪70 ......................(Add to My Clips‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪71 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪71 .........................‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪72‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪72 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪73 ........................ Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪73 ..............(Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪73 ...... (Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪74 .... (Reset‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪74 ...... (Myset‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪75 ...... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪76 .........................(K‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫)‪76 ............. (Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪77 ............. (j/Y‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ‪78 .............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪HDR‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ‪80 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪81 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء( ‪82 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪83 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪84 ....................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪84 ..................(R‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪84 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪86 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪87 ............................‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪87 ....................‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪87 ....................‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪88 .......................‬‬‫‪88 .................................. AF/MF R‬‬‫‪89 ........................... Button/Dial S‬‬‫‪/Release/j T‬‬‫‪89 ........................... Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪90 ..........................Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪91 ......................... Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪92 ............................# Custom W‬‬‫‪93 .......................K/Color/WB X‬‬‫‪94 .......................Record/Erase Y‬‬‫‪95 ................................... Movie Z‬‬‫‪96 ..............................K Utility b‬‬‫‪97 ................................... AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪97 ..................................MF Assist‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪98 ......................(Button Function‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪100 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫)‪102 .............. (KControl Settings‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪105 ...................‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪106 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪106 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪111 .............................‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪112 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪112 ........‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪113 ............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪114 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪114 ..............................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪87 ..................‬‬‫‪87 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪87 ........................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪87 ..................c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪87 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪110‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪115 ...............................‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪115 ......‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪116 ................‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪116 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪117 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪119 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪119 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪120 ..........................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪121 .......................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪121 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪122 ...............................‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪107 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪107 ................................. PENPAL‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪108 ......................................Share‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪109 ..................................... Album‬‬‫‪109 ......... C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪123‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪123 ...............................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪123 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪124 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪125 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪126 .........................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪127 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪127 ....................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪128 ..............‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪129 .............(VF-4‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪129 ............................‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪130 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪132 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪132 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪132 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪132 ................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪133 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪134‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪134 .................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪136 ......................................‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪138 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪144 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪147‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪147 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫‪153‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫‪42‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪22‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪(Hand-Held Starlight) SCN‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪(Fireworks) SCN‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪34‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪45‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪Anti-shock‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪92‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪54‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪54‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ً‬‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪32‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪56‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪52‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪48‬‬‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪Clips‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺨﺎﺕ(‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫‪91‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪87‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪19‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫‪90‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫‪91‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪56‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪112‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪90‬‬‫‪90‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫)‪Redeye Fix (JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪85‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫‪121‬‬‫‪119‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪112‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪113‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫‪17‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬‫‪74‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Myset‬‬‫‪74‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫‪87‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫‪91‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪f‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .................................. ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ*‪ ...(P) 1‬ﺹ‪66 ،45 ،33-31 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻘﺐ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻏﻄﺎء ‪Hot shoe‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪86 ،70 ،62 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ /‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪/54 .‬ﺹ‪88 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ c‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬‫‪ d‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪119 ،116 ،100 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩ( ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪100 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) F‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ‪) F /‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء(‬‫)ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) I‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ‪) # /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(58 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) H‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪) P /‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ( )ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) z‬ﺹ‪(72 ,44 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ‪jY /‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪71 ،64 ،44 ،42 ،18 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪143 ،107 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪127 .‬‬‫‪/Fn 5‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ....................G‬ﺹ‪/98 .‬ﺹ‪67 ،40 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .................................... U‬ﺹ‪48 ،38 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺯﺭ ‪) R‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪ ...........H/‬ﺹ‪/98 ،36 .‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .....................................MENU‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪65 ،19 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .................................. z‬ﺹ‪72 ،44 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ* ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪66 ،17 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺯﺭ ‪) q‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ( ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺯﺭ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ(‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ FGHI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬‫)ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-LM1‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫• ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ً‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪(C‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫‪2‬‬‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ" )ﺹ‪.(123 .‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬ﻭ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (124 .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ً‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ‪.(18 .‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬‫)ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬‫‪.(3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪.(126 .‬‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗُﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[d‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪2016‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪.[min‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪z‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪cd‬‬‫‪e UTO1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪g TO‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i 3‬‬‫‪j N‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0a‬‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬

‫‪+7‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪115–110 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ............................. Super FP‬ﺹ‪127 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ....................................... RC‬ﺹ‪127 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ...............‬ﺹ‪/78 .‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ٍ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .....m‬ﺹ‪137 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ٍ :‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬‬‫‪ ........................ Anti-Shock‬ﺹ‪ / 54 .‬ﺹ‪92 .‬‬‫‪AR 18‬‬‫‪FPS‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪utsr‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ m‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪125 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪50 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪33 – 30 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪33 – 30 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪19 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ...............................................‬ﺹ‪98 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪97 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪37 – 20 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset w‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ .........‬ﺹ‪35 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪50 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ E‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪28 mm‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪ F‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ ..................................Movie Effect G‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪ H‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ................................. Clips‬ﺹ‪42 ،39 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻷﻓﻖ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪.................. A‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫‪................... SCN‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪................... ART‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪........................J‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪........................ P‬ﺹ‪30 .‬‬‫‪........................A‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪........................ S‬ﺹ‪32 .‬‬‫‪........................M‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫‪...................... n‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )((‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(134 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪] v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ )ﺹ‪(35 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ؛ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(A‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫• ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪P/A/S/M‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ ،(33-30 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪.4‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ّ ،‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )‪ .(GF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫‪Landscape‬‬‫‪Landscape+Portrait‬‬‫‪Sport‬‬‫‪Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫‪Night Scene‬‬‫‪Night+Portrait‬‬‫‪Children‬‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫‪High Key‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫‪DIS Mode‬‬‫‪Macro‬‬‫‪Nature Macro‬‬‫‪Candle‬‬‫‪Sunset‬‬‫‪Documents‬‬‫‪) Panorama‬ﺹ‪(25 .‬‬‫( ‪Fireworks‬‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫‪n Fisheye Effect f‬‬‫‪n Wide-Angle w‬‬‫‪n Macro m‬‬‫‪3D Photo T‬‬‫‪Panning J‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ]‪ ،[n Wide-Angle] ،[n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[Panorama] ،[Hand-Held Starlight] ،[e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Hand-Held Starlight‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1024 × 1824‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪.100%‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ I‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺹ‪.(116 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻓﻲ ‪ SCN‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﻱ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻨﻬﻲ‬‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫*‪Pop Art I/II‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪Pale&Light Color I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫*‪Grainy Film I/II‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫*‪Pin Hole I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫*‪Diorama I/II‬‬‫*‪Cross Process I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﺑﺆﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺸﻰء ‪ Cross Process II‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫*‪Dramatic Tone I/II‬‬‫*‪Key Line I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ُﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫*‪Watercolor I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ‪.‬‬‫*‪Vintage I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻨﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺘﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺤﻮﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫*‪Partial Color I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫* ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ II‬ﻭ ‪ III‬ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﻣُﻌ ﱠﺪﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )‪.(I‬‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ART‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪Vintage II‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .HI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪،‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﻧﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ART‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(J) PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .PHOTO STORY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪Standard :A‬‬‫‪Speed :B‬‬‫‪Zoom In/Out :C‬‬‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪*Layout :D‬‬‫‪Fun Frames :F‬‬‫‪Works in progres :Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪"v .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )ﺹ‪(61 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،I‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HGF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Finish later‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(29 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Discard‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫)ﺹ‪(44 .‬‬‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪) (%‬ﺹ‪ ،(30.‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Dial Function‬ﺹ‪.(89.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.O‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫]‪.[4:3‬‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪ [MF] ،[S-AF] ،[AF Mode‬ﻭ ]‪ [S-AF+MF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪/Movie‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪) Picture mode/Digital Tele-converter/‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪([Layout‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ INFO/Fn‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Q Works in progress‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )!(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FG‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"s‬‬‫ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ "‪."s‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ,(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪(S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬‫"‪4000 250 125 60 30 15 60‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫‪125 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪(M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(P‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (P‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/4000‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) [Noise Reduct.] v .‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪(TIME/BULB‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ )‪ :(TIME‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴَﺎ‪) "Bulb/Time Monitor" v .‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Live Bulb‬ﺹ‪ (92 .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(129 .‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ* ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [Live Bulb‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Live Time‬ﺹ‪.(92 .‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Composite Settings‬ﺹ‪.(92 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[LIVECOMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(129 .‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ) ‪( V‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪5x‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫‪ Y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪/3D/Panorama‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪.(PHOTO STORY) J‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪00:00:04‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +3.0‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪،Hand-Held Starlight ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(n‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ ،(n‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )ﺹ‪(62 .‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Movie Tele‬‬‫‪converter‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Movie tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Movie Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ mode1‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪ ،(95 .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ ]‪ [Diorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ‪.Art Fade‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Art Fade‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.(16:9) XN‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪) [Movie+Photo Mode] v .‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Movie+Photo Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[mode1‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.Clips‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﺹ‪ (57 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(Clips) g‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪Clips‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ HI ،‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪ ،(Clips) g‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫]‪.[Clip Recording Time‬‬‫‪" v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )ﺹ‪(57 .‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪MOV 1920x1080‬‬‫‪HD F‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ z‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،My Clips‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﻳُﻐﻴّﺮ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.c‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Play My Clips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .GF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .My Clips‬ﺹ‪ (70 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪2016.4‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪z‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪(39 .‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،FG‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Play My Clips‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Rearrange Order‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ My Clips‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Preset Destination‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ c My Clips‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Delete My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪AR 40‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Export My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Clip Effects‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Transition Effect‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Happy Days‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Volume‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) BGM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Happy Days‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Sound‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Preview‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤُﺠﻤّﻊ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ ‪.Normal‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،z‬ﺛﻢ ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [See all My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Begin Export‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ]‪[Happy Days‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ ،[Happy Days‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻛـ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻭﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪45:67:89‬‬‫‪2341‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ .(Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫)‪ (R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ" )ﺹ‪.(55 .‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [+‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(57 .‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(Clips) g‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 42‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ‪ C‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪" g .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(112 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،C-AF‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [Full-time AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[On‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ n ،M ،S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.J‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART ،A‬ﻭ ‪ SCN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫]‪ [Live Control‬ﻓﻲ ‪) KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪ (90 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART ،A‬ﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ*‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ............................................. *n‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪50 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..........................................*ISO‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫‪.z‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬

‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪HI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ )"–"( ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻇﻼﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫)"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪.±5.0 EV‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ )‪(0‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .±3.0 EV‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ،±3.0 EV‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0 EV‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ً 81‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Image Aspect] ،[Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺹ‪.(47 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪GF‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫‪) I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪) K‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Face Priority Off N‬‬‫‪Face Priority On I‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪Face & R. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[C-AF‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[(Digital ESP metering) p‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪) U‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‪z /‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪(14× ،10× ،7× ،5×) .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪S-AF C-AF MF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪ S-AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ (MF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MF‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ" ﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ" ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1234‬‬‫‪250‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪ESP‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪SH‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ ([I Face Priority‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ً‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫‪HI‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻲ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ — ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ً ISO‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Recommended‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪25600–200 ،LOW‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰء ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻠﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪/P/Q‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ W/X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪– 2000K‬‬‫‪14000K‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻇﻼﻻ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬‫• ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [W] ،[Q] ،[P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 3 ،2 ،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫! ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [WB NG Retry‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO 50‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪OFF S-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Still-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS2‬‬‫‪Vertical Shake‬‬‫‪I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )‪ (Y‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS3‬‬‫‪Horizontal‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪ (Z‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. On‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭ‪ 1000‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[S-IS AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ً [S-IS1‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬‫]‪.[S-IS AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (G) jY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪Yc‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪Yc‬‬‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential H‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 7.1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential L‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3.7‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (49 .‬ﻭ ]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(97 .‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪Interval] ،[Number of Frames] ،[Y Timer‬‬‫‪ ،[Length‬ﻭ ]‪.[Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ,HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 12 Y12s‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ ،S‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ ،T‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪4608x3456‬‬‫‪L F+‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪SN‬‬‫‪MN‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ ،XN ،YN ،YF) JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ (WN‬ﻭ ‪ .RAW‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ SF‬ﻭ‬‫‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ،YF/YN/XN/WN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪) [K Set‬ﺹ‪ (93 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪HD F‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪* (Full HD Normal) FHD‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪HD F‬‬‫‪HD N‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )ﺹ‪.(39 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫)‪* (Full HD Fine‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪* (Full HD Normal‬‬‫)‪* (HD Fine‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫–‬

‫)‪* (HD Normal‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪* (Motion JPEG ،720×1280) H‬‬‫‪* (Motion JPEG ،480×640) I‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫–‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫*‪ 1‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ّ‬‫ﻭﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ UNLOCK‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (I) #‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Flash Auto‬‬‫‪Flash Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪#!/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ ،M‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪!SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪/#SLOW2‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪،#FULL‬‬‫‪ #1/4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ ،INFO‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ً‬‫• ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪A/P‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪#AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫!‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬

‫‪$‬‬
‫‪#‬‬

‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪/‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ $ ،#AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ‬‫ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪17mm f1.8‬‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪14 – 42mm IIR‬‬‫‪0.55‬ﻡ‬‫‪14 – 42mm EZ‬‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪40 – 150mm‬‬‫‪0.9‬ﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ f‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ‪.(75 .‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪h‬‬

‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Muted‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monochrome‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ّ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Underwater x‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ" )ﺹ‪(26 .‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪*Partial Color H‬‬‫*‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Partial Color‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ OFF/ON‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(Diorama) s‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.O‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ n‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.z‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪AR 62‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻦ ‪1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ .(P‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ (P) l‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻦ ‪1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻭ‪.3200‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪5 6 7 89‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪e d c‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪jk‬‬

‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪r‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪250‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪v uts‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫‪w‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪115–110 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ .........GPS‬ﺹ‪113 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ............................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪96 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪121 .‬‬‫‪ .................................. Share order 6‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪94 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫‪ c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ........................................ 3D‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪ L‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫‪ ........................... PHOTO STORY‬ﺹ‪29 .‬‬‫‪ p m‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ....................... HDR‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪37 – 20 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪33 – 30 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪33 – 30 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ n‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪ p‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪106 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪50 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪19 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ*‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪q‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/t‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫)‪(HIGF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(I‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪/(H‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(GF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(69 .‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪z‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(39 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪2016.4‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ×‪2‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ×‪14‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫‪z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[m‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Start‬‬‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Happy Days‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ .[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ 10‬‬‫‪Movie Interval‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Play Movie‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.H/I‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،z‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ )]‪،[Erase Selected] ،[0‬‬‫]‪) "([Share Order Selected‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪) [Quick Erase] v .‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Share Order‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Share Order‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ .h‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪F‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.G‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ )]‪،[0‬‬‫]‪) "([Share Order Selected] ،[Erase Selected‬ﺹ‪" ،(70 .‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(112 .‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Share Order‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ H) JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (I‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ )]‪([Share Order Selected] ،[Erase Selected] ،[0‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ ،[Erase Selected] ،[0‬ﺃﻭ ]‪Share‬‬‫‪.[Order Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ )ﺹ‪ (67 .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ v‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪ ،[Erase Selected] ،[0‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Add to My Clips‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(Add to My Clips) My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Add to My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،FGHI‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ ‪.P‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪/My Clips/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ R‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪) "(Share Order‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ EVF‬ﻭ ‪) OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺹ‪*(107 .‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫* ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(138 .‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪T Off‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Y12s Off‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Y2s Off‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse YC Off‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Shooting Menu 2/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪) Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(73 .‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪) Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪(74 .‬‬‫‪) Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪(75 .‬‬‫‪) K‬ﺹ‪(76 .‬‬‫‪) Image Aspect‬ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫‪) Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪(76 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪/Intrvl. Sh.) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ( )ﺹ‪(77 ،54 .‬‬‫‪) Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫‪) Bracketing‬ﺹ‪(78 .‬‬‫‪) HDR‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪) Multiple Exposure‬ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪) Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪) # RC Mode‬ﺹ‪(83 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Format‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪(Reset‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪[Full‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(138 .‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪(Myset‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ )"‪ .("Myset‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Set‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪" v Myset‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(138 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.Myset‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ MySet‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ MySet‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺨﺰﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪) "Mode Dial Function" v .‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[Picture Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(61 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Gradation‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪High Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫)‪(i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Color Filter‬‬‫)‪(Monochrome‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫ﻭﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪N:None‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎء‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪75 AR‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪Monochrome‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪N:Normal‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍء‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Picture Mode Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(K‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [K‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(" )ﺹ‪" ،(56 .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(" )ﺹ‪(57 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،[K Set] .JPEG‬‬‫]‪" v [Pixel Count‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ" )ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(" )ﺹ‪(57 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ×‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،w ،f ،s ،T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.SCN‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪(j/Y‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪) [YC‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Number of Frames‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y Timer‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Length‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،I‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪Button‬‬‫‪) [Function‬ﺹ‪.(98 .‬‬‫‪) AE BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(S‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫‪) "EV Step" v‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) WB BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﻦ‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪) A – B‬ﻣﺰﺭﻕ – ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﻭ‪) G – M‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ – ﻣﺨﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) FL BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪) "EV Step" v‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) ISO BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫]‪) "ISO-Auto Set" v .[ISO-Auto Set‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ .(HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪،M‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [HDR‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪3F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 2.0EV‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ HDR2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ .HDR1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪7F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪3F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ HDR‬ﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪ ,(98 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.HDR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ً‬‫• ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[HDR2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪،[HDR2‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪.–0.5 EV‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[HDR2]/[HDR1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[sRGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪.[Full-time AF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Number of‬‬‫‪Frames‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/2‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Number of Frames‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪" v :RAW‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/q‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/MENU‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪،A ،P‬‬‫‪/M ،S‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Numeber of Frames‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Length‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻭﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [Rec View‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 31‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬‫‪AR 82‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" )ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪) m‬ﺹ‪(68 .‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪) R‬ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪) Edit‬ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪) Connection to Smartphone‬ﺹ‪(111 .‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ .[JPEG Edit‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Current‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪Custom1‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Custom2‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ R‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣُﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪ FGHI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 640 × 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺠﻴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ART‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪O‬‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.q Playback Menu‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ ‪GF‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﻭﺟﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[20sec] – [0.3sec‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[AUTOq‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪111‬‬‫‪c/# Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪87 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.c Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫‪) AF/MF R‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪) Button/Dial S‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫‪) Release/j/Image Stabilizer T‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫‪) Disp/8/PC U‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/p/ISO V‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪) # Custom W‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪) K/Color/WB X‬ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪) Record/Erase Y‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪) Movie Z‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) K Utility b‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪T Release/j/Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪R‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫—‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time‬‬‫‪Focusing‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬‫)‪ .(MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ peaking‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪p‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪AF Illuminator‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪I Face Priority‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪AF Area Pointer‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Button/Dial S‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪،[IFunction] ،[RFunction] ،[UFunction] ،[FFunction‬‬‫]‪[lFunction] ،[nFunction] ،[GFunction‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫‪98‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪F / %‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪Aperture value / F‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪F‬‬‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫]‪[Prev / Next] / [G / Magnify‬‬‫—‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ,S‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.F‬‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Mode Dial‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ MySet‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release/j/Image Stabilizer T‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫‪j L fps‬‬‫‪j H fps‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪ (49 .‬ﻭ ‪) C-AF‬ﺹ‪.(49 .‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [S‬ﻭ ]‪ .[T‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Button Function‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪54‬‬‫‪j Image‬‬‫‪Stabilization‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﻂ‪/‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Half Way Rls‬‬‫‪With IS‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) IS‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Lens I.S. Priority‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release Lag-Time‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Short‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪*.‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫* ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪/A/P‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live SCP‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(22 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪Art Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪Scene Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(44 .‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ"‪"My Clips‬‬‫)ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ( ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪،105‬‬‫‪106‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [X] ،[y] ،[x] ،[w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪105‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [High‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Art LV Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪LV Close Up Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪48‬‬‫‪zLock‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ :[mode1] q Close Up Mode‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ) ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ (× 14‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Hold‬‬‫—‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﺘﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪91 AR‬‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.[Auto] ISO‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪.M‬‬‫]‪ :[P/A/S‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫—‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(97 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ Bulb/Time Monitor‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [TIME] ،[BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[COMP‬‬‫‪Live Bulb‬‬‫‪Live Time‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﻜﻮﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ‪ (54 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(54 .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ً‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ )ﺹ‪.(34 .‬‬‫‪# Custom W‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪AR 92‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪W‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪106‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪106‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪60 ،45‬‬

‫‪K/Color/WB X‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪ ([K4] - [K1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Y SF‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Wmall‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫‪52‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪K Set‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫‪Record/Erase Y‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(69 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(73 .‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬‫‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪Pmdd0000.jpg :sRGB‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪_mdd0000.jpg :Adobe RGB‬‬‫—‬‫‪Priority Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪dpi Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 63‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[.Copyright Info‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪،2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬‫‪05/63‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫—‬‫‪Delete‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[Copyright Settings‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪62‬‬‫‪ Recording Volume‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪KVolume Limiter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wind Noise‬‬‫‪Reduction‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪Movie+Photo‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ‪ mode2‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(I‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.mode2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫‪95 AR‬‬‫‪K Utility b‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪133‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(45 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪: Warning‬‬‫‪Level‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪.8‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪Touch Screen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫—‬‫‪Electronic‬‬‫‪Zoom Speed‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) [AF Area] v .‬ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(98 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﻤﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪(Button Function‬‬‫]‪[Button Function‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻸﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫]‪[nFunction] / [GFunction] / [IFunction] / *1 [RFunction] / [UFunction] / [FFunction‬‬‫)]‪*4 [lFunction] / (*3 [P] / *2 [Direct Function‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪FGHI‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪F‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪ .[AEL/AFL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [zLock‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺹ‪.(53 .‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(88 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪(Test Picture) K TEST‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻃﻔﺎء ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪RAWK‬‬‫‪Myset1 – Myset4‬‬‫‪u‬‬‫‪) I/H‬ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪/‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء(‬‫ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 98‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫‪AF Stop‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫‪) GLock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬‫‪Electronic Zoom‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ ،Peaking‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ‬‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ BKT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪) b‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[Video Out] ،[HDMI‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(HD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،AV‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Video Out‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪A‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.AV‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪1080i‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.1080i HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪) [Video Out‬ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪) [HDMI] v‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(KControl Settings‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[KControl Settings‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ (H‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪(H‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪z‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ*‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ*‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ )‪(H‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ*‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪SCN/ART‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪Vintage II‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ*‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ )‪ [Live SCP] (H‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪) KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ................................N‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ ..........................................J‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪ .........................................T‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ..................................z‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ......................x‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ......................... y‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪98 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪50 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪57 ،56 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Live SCP‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪) KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪ (90 .‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Live control‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪) KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪ .(90 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ z‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [LV-Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪) [Histogram Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) q Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [q Close Up Mode‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪ [mode2‬ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ z‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،U‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(P‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FGHI‬ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.U‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫‪) G Settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺫﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪ 100–9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2016.4‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪z‬‬

‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪2016.04.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(39 .‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫]‪[# Slow Limit] [# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪)/1‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ×‪(2‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪*[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫]‪[K Set‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫‪X‬‬‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬‫‪W‬‬‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫* ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬‫‪F‬‬‫)ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬‫‪N‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪*3456×4608‬‬‫‪*2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪*960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑـ‬‫‪ .OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ً #‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺹ‪.(87 .‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Send A Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Search‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Send Picture‬‬‫‪Sending‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ /‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AOLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ ‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Please Wait‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺠﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ]‪.[Receive Picture Request‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Accept‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪Electronic Viewfinder‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Receive Picture‬‬‫‪Receiving‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪107 AR‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Address Book‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AOLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ ‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪A. OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Address List‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻃﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [z‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪ [y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ‬‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Address List‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[New Pairing‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Search Timer‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪107‬‬‫‪108‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Small‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.640 × 480‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Large‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 3: Medium‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.1280 × 960‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Copy All‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Album Mem. Usage‬‬‫‪Album Mem. Setup‬‬‫‪Picture Copy Size‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪107‬‬

‫‪B‬‬
‫‪g‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪ .PENPAL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﺍﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪.[Size 2: Medium‬‬‫]‪ [All Erase‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Format Album‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Large‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Medium‬ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻑ ﻳﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪108‬‬‫‪108‬‬‫‪108‬‬‫‪108‬‬‫‪108‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪My OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪PENPAL‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫‪ viewfinder‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﻪ‬‫)‪ (k‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫]‪ [+7‬ﻭ ]‪.[-7‬‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪.VF-4‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ viewfinder‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ VF-4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-5‬‬‫—‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫—‬‫‪109 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪(OI.Share) OLYMPUS Image Share ،‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 110‬‬‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://oishare.olympus-imaging.com/‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(150 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share App‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ ،(SSID‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪QR‬‬‫‪Connecting to your‬‬‫‪smartphone.‬‬‫‪Read QR code by‬‬‫‪'OLYMPUS Image Share'.‬‬‫‪SSID‬‬‫‪: E-PL8-P-00000001‬‬‫‪Password : 11223344‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪(SSID‬‬‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬‫‪End Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪3/3‬‬‫‪Preparing Wi-Fi Connection‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [End Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪" v .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪) "(Share Order‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ‪.(110 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪30‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Image Transfer‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Save‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Remote‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺯﺭ ‪ Add Location‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ .GPS‬ﻻ ﺗﻨ ِﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Add Location‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫‪.GPS‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪ [Private‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪[One-Time‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [Private‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ [One-Time‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Private‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[One-Time‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Private Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]‪.[Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (91 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪:Windows‬‬‫‪/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7 SP1/Windows Vista SP2‬‬‫‪Windows 10‬‬‫‪:Macintosh‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10.11 – 10.8‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫• ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Windows Photo Gallery‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ (91 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻣﻦ "‪."http://support.olympus-imaging.com/ov3download/‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ"‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "‪ ،"Setup‬ﻓﺎﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪ (OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ"‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪Windows ‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪) "Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2.13‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫‪ README‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪/Windows 7 SP1/Windows Vista SP2‬‬‫‪Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8‬‬‫‪Macintosh ‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ – 10.8‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10.11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫‪ README‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (91 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(120 .‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (91 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ُﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )ﺣﺠﺰ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫‪(f) Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪(u) More‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫×<‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .z‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .z‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ "ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫<‬
‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 122‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .z‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ً‬‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Release Lag-Time‬ﺹ‪ (89 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ "‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ" )ﺹ‪.(149 .‬‬‫‪123 AR‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬‬‫ﻭ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻦ‬‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] v .‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ "LOCK‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 10.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 7.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ*‬‫‪428‬‬‫‪637‬‬‫‪917‬‬‫‪1984‬‬‫‪2941‬‬‫‪1245‬‬‫‪2051‬‬‫‪4068‬‬‫‪5954‬‬‫‪2160‬‬‫‪3170‬‬‫‪6259‬‬‫‪9041‬‬‫‪3814‬‬‫‪5548‬‬‫‪10614‬‬‫‪15258‬‬‫‪5425‬‬‫‪7875‬‬‫‪15258‬‬‫‪20344‬‬‫‪8137‬‬‫‪11625‬‬‫‪22193‬‬‫‪30516‬‬‫‪12206‬‬‫‪17438‬‬‫‪30516‬‬‫‪40688‬‬‫‪27125‬‬‫‪40688‬‬‫‪61033‬‬‫‪81377‬‬‫*ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻢ* ( ‪ 24) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ* (‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ* (‬‫‪‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN22‬‬‫–‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RC‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(73 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪.Super FP‬‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺪﻝ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﺭﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪7m‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ٍ 4‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺘﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.RC‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪(VF-4‬‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (VF-4‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻼ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪/Sleep‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺦ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌُﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(10 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(MAL–1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(SEMA–1‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺼﺪﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪129 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪VF-4‬‬‫‪VF-1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/AV‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻒ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ *‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪SD/SDHC/‬‬‫‪SDXC/Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫*‪PENPAL PP-13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫‪MAL-1‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 130‬‬

E-PL8 ‫ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬:‫ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬:.Olympus ‫ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬،‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬2*

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 7-14mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 300mm f4.0 IS PRO‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‬

FCON-P01‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬WCON-P01‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬MCON-P01‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬MCON-P02

7‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬4‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬*Teleconverter MC-14‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬Four Thirds ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬MMF-2/MMF-3 1*
Four Thirds ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬OM ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬MF-2 1*OM2 ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬FL-300R‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬FL-600R

FL-14‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬STF-22

TF-22 2*

RF-112*‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬SRF-11

FC-1.ED 300mm f4.0 IS PRO/ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO ‫ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬4*.‫ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬Eye-Fi ‫ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬SD ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬5*

131 AR‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪) c Custom Menu‬ﺹ‪ (96 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.b‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﺛﻢ ‪.z‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Sleep] v‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،sleep‬ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] v‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭ ]‪.[Image Aspect‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(17 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ - Pixel Mapping" v .‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(133 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Yes][Format‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪AR 136‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is too‬‬‫‪high. Please wait‬‬‫‪for cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪The lens is locked.‬‬‫‪Please extend the‬‬‫‪lens.‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(15 .‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪status of a lens.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪137 AR‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬Kv

3* 2* 1*‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

73
74
61
56
57
56
76
،54
77




















―
―
jNatural
YN
MOVnFHDF
4:3
Off







o

53







78

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

79

80

82

127























j/Y

S-I.S. Auto

Still Picture
Movie

―
―
―

Image Stabilizer
Bracketing

AE BKT
A– B
WB
BKT
G–M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
HDR

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

Number of Frames
Auto Gain
Overlay99

Number of Frames

00:00:01

Start Waiting TimeMultiple Exposure
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse

00:00:01

Interval Length

OffTime Lapse Movie

Off

X

8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

81



K
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter

Movie-I.S. On
Off
1.0EV 3f―



Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Card Setup W
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode

# RC Mode

AR 138

q Playback Menu
v

3*

2*

68










84
84
85
86
86
121
86
111



1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬―Start
Happy Days
BGM
All
Slide
m
3sec
Slide Interval
Short
Movie Interval
On
R―
RAW Data Edit―
JPEG Edit
Sel. Image
Edit
―
R
―
Image Overlay―
Print Order―
Reset Protect―
Connection to Smartphone‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬qd Setup Menu
v
17
87
87
87

8

114

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

87
87

3*

2*







1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――Vivid ،k ±0 ،j ±0
0.5sec
Private
―
―
―
On
Off
―

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬X*W
i
Rec View
Wi-Fi Connect Settings
Private Password
Reset share Order
Reset Wi-Fi Settingsc Menu Display# Menu Display‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬d

Wi-Fi
Settings
c/# Menu
Display
Firmware.‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬139 ARc Custom Menu
v

88

3*

2*

1*

















































‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

mode1
mode2
mode1

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
S-AF
C-AF
Off
S-AF
C-AF
MF
On
On
b
Off
Off
o
On
K
On
L
U
RREC

98











89




























Off
On
3.5 fps
8 fps
On
On
Off
NormalAF ModeFull-time AF
AEL/AFL

Reset Lens
Bulb/Time Focusing
Focus Ring
Magnify
MF Assist
Peaking
P Set HomeAF Illuminator
I Face Priority
AF Area PointerButton/Dial S
FFunction
UFunction
RFunction
ButtonIFunction
Function
GFunctionnFunctionlFunction
P
A
Dial
S
FunctionMq8‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬



89

#
j/Y
Direct Function
AF StopF
FNo.
Shutter
Shutter
Prev/Next
Dial1
Exposure
Dial1
Ps
Off

Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬AF/MF R c

Dial Direction
Mode Dial Function
Release/j/Image Stabilizer T
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
j L fpsj H fpsj Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Release Lag-Time

AR 140

v

3*

2*

1*






90

―



























8

91

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
91

92








































































141 AR










‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Disp/8/PC U c‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
1080i
Off

Live Guide
Live Control
Art Menu
Scene Menu
Overall ،Image Only‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬،u ،Image Only‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬"My Clips" ،‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬،O
playbackOff‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
255
0
On
Off
Normal
mode1
Auto
mode2
Off
mode1
White
Hold
1min
On
Auto
1/3EV
Auto
Standard
Auto
1/3EV
1600 :High Limit
200 :Default
P/A/S
p
Auto
8min
-7
Off
0.5 sec(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬2) Off
1 sec

HDMI OutHDMI Control

HDMI
Video Out

iAUTO
P/A/S/M KControl
ART
Settings
SCN
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings

G Settings
Displayed Grid
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
Live View Boost
Frame Rate
Art LV Mode
Flicker reduction
LV Close Up ModezLock
qClose Up Mode
Peaking Settings
Backlit LCD
Sleep
8
USB Mode
Exp/p/ISO V
EV Step
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
ISO
ISO Step
ISO-Auto Set
ISO-Auto
Metering
AEL Metering
Bulb/Time Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Anti-Shockz
Composite Settings

v

92

93

2*

1*







1/250

# X-Sync.







1/60

# Slow Limit







Off

w+F
K/Color/WB X







‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬،K3 XN ،K2 YN ،K1 YF
K4 WN

2400×3200
960×1280
Off
Auto





















On











WB Auto
sRGB

















94

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

G : 0 ،A : 0——

Off
RAW+JPEG
Reset
Off
No
350dpi
Off

P






On
±0
On
Off
On
mode1









133

—


±0



±0



96






—
On
On
NormalNormalK Set
Xiddle
Pixel
Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll >All Reset
W Keep Warm Color
WB+#
Color Space
Record/Erase Y
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
File Name
Edit Filename
Priority Set
dpi Settings
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name
Movie Z
nMode8‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

—
—

95

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬# Custom W c

3*

Movie R
Recording Volume
KVolume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Movie EffectMovie+Photo Mode
K Utility b
Pixel Mappingp
ExposureJ
Shift
5: Warning Level
Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-FiStill Picture
Electronic
Movie Zoom Speed

AR 142

# Accessory Port Menu
g 3*

2*

،107
108
108

109

8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬143 AR‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬OLYMPUS PENPAL Share A#—

Please Wait—

Address List
Address
Search TimerBook
New Pairing
My OLYMPUS PENPAL

30 sec——Size 1: Small



—
—
—
—
Size 2: Medium

109

109

1*




j ±0, k ±0
OnPicture Send Size
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Copy All
Reset Protect
Album Mem. UsageAlbum Mem. Setup
Picture Copy Size
Electronic Viewfinder
EVF Adjust
EVF Auto SwitchBC‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫‪E-PL8‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1,040,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(3 : 2‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪ 60 - 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ "‪Live MOS 3/4‬‬‫‪ 17.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 16.05‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪ 81‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪) 20 - –2 EV‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(ISO100 ،M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :A/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :M/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪/‬‬‫‪ :ART/PHOTO STORY :J‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪ 1 ،1/3) 25600 - 200 ،LOW‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪ 1 ،1/2 ،1/3) ±5 EV‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪AR 144‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪SD, SDHC, SDXC and Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-I‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.3‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪،PRINT Image Matching III‬‬‫ﻭ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ 48 PCM ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪My Clips/‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪(Sequential H‬‬‫‪ 7.1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 8.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilization‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪([Off‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 5 :‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬‫) ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪/(D‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 117.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 68.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 38.4‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 374‬ﺟﻢ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20 /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪) 90% - 30%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) 90% - 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ٌ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬‫‪145 AR‬‬‫‪FL-LM1 Flash ‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫)‪(10 (ISO200•m)) 7 (ISO100•m‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 28‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 39.2‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 32.2‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 43.4‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 25‬ﻏﻢ‬‫‪ ‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‬‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1210‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 35.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 46‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 8.35‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 400 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒَﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 38‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 83‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬‫‪ 70‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 146‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ — ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ — ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ — ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ )ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ُ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺒﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬‫ﻃﻔﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪147 AR‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 148‬‬‫•‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ ٍﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ً‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗُﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮَﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻎ(‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫‪149 AR‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﺛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻑء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺷﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪AR 150‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍ ًء‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻦ ‪OLYMPUS CORPORATION‬‬‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ IM001‬ﺗﻤﺘﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪2014/53/‬‬‫‪.EU‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus-europa.com/‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫"‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬‫ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻴﻚ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ( ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪151 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺜﺎﻟﻴﻦ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Apical‬‬‫ّ‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Four Thirds ،Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ‬‫‪ Four Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS CORPORATION‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ‬‫‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ "ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪"DCF/‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(JEITA‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE‬‬‫‪PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE‬‬‫‪OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN‬‬‫‪COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC‬‬‫‪VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT‬‬‫‪WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED‬‬‫‪IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A‬‬‫‪VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE‬‬‫‪AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR‬‬‫‪SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.‬‬‫‪ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED‬‬‫‪FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪AR 152‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬AF illuminator
88 ...................(‫)ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬88 ،49 ........................................ AF Mode
109 ........................... Album Mem. Usage
93 ................................................ >All92 ........................................... Anti-Shock26 ،20 ............................ (‫ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ART
37 ...............................................Art Fade
90 .........................................Art LV Mode91 .............(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬Auto Focus SoundB
91 ..........................................Backlit LCD
78 ................................. BKT (Bracketing)78 ............................................Bracketing
33 ................................................... BULB
88 .............................Bulb/Time Focusing
92 ............................... Bulb/Time Monitor
92 .................................. Bulb/Time Timer98 ،89 ............................. Button Function

C
49 .................................................... C-AF
49 ............................................. C-AF+TR
73 .......................................... Card Setup
92 ............................. Composite Settings
109 ............................................. Copy All
94 ............................... Copyright Settings
88 ............................... Custom Menu (c)D
89 ....................................... Dial Direction
89 ........................................Dial Function
99 ،76 .....................Digital Tele-converter
90 ..................................... Displayed Grid
94 ..........................................dpi Settings

153 AR‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬127 .......................................RC Mode #87 ...................................................... W
87 .............................c/# Menu Display
88 .....................................P Set Home88 ،47 ..............(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬I
89 ............................................. j H fps
89 .............................................. j L fps
90 .................................. G/Info Settings
90 .............................K Control Settings
91 ................................. z (Preview) lock91 ..............................q Close Up Mode92 ........................................Slow Limit #106 ،92 ................................... .X-Sync #92 ................................................. w+F
93 ................................................. WB+#
96 ............................. Warning Level 8
98 ................................................ I/H
67 ...................................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
67 ...........................(‫ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬U
95 .............................................. n Mode69 ..................................(‫ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬70 .................................... (‫ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬v
69 ...........................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬093 ......................... W Keep Warm Color
84 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬R
93 ................................................ K Set
91 ......................................(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬8
70 ..................................... (‫ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬R
87 .............................(‫ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬i
68 .................................. (‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬m
89 ....................... j Image Stabilization

A
31 ......................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬A
107 ........................ Accessory Port Menu
108 .................................... Address Book
97 .............................................. AEL/AFL
92 .......................................AEL Metering

105 ............................................Light Box
92 ..............................................Live Bulb
92 ............................................. Live Time
33 ........................................... LIVE TIME
90 ................................... Live View BoostM
33 ..................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬M
98 ....................................................... MF
49 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬MF
97 ،88 ....................................... MF Assist
89 ..............................Mode Dial Function
90 ......................................... Mode Guide
61 ........................................Monochrome95 ،62 ......................................... Movie R
37 .........................................Movie Effect
38 ............................. Movie+Photo Mode
38 ........................... Movie Tele-converter
37 ............................................Multi Echo
39 ...............................................My Clips
109 .................... My OLYMPUS PENPAL
74 ................................................... Myset

N
91 .......................................... Noise Filter
91 ...................................... .Noise ReductO108 ،107 .................. OLYMPUS PENPAL
37 .................................... One Shot EchoP
30 ......................................(‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬P
24 ............................................... Panning
25 ............................................ Panorama
91 ..................................Peaking Settings
28 ...................................PHOTO STORY
75 ،61 ................................. Picture Mode90 ......................... Picture Mode Settings
93 .......................................... Pixel Count133 .................................... Pixel Mapping
98 ......................................(‫ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬Preview
91 ....................................... Preview Lock
119 ................................................... Print
94 ........................................... Priority Set

E
94 .......................................Edit Filename
96 ....................... Electronic Zoom Speed
109 ....................................................EVF
91 ............................................... EV Step
96 ..................................... Exposure Shift
96 .................................................. Eye-FiF
94 ............................................ File Name
87 ..............................................Firmware
90 .................................. Flicker reduction
11 ........................................................ Fn
88 .......................................... Focus Ring
73 ............................ Format (Card setup)
88 ......................................... Full-time AFG
61 ،26 .................................... Grainy Film

H
89 ........................... Half Way Rls With IS
90 ................................................... HDMI
80 .....................................................HDR
50 ...................Highlight&Shadow Control
19 ............................... Histogram Display
90 .............................. Histogram SettingsI
22 ،20 ............................... iAUTO (A)56 .......................................Image Aspect
53 ...................................Image Stabilizer
90 ........... Info Settings (G/Info Settings)
91 ،51 ................................................ ISO
92 ..............................................ISO-Auto
92 ....................................... ISO-Auto Set
91 .............................................. ISO StepJ
85 ............................................ JPEG Edit

L
89 .................................. Lens I.S. Priority
96 ......................................... Level Adjust

AR 154

‫‪Q‬‬‫ﺃ‬‫‪94 ......................................... Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪111 ....................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪66 .............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪67 ،66 ........................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪67 ..................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪69 ،66 ...................................‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪56 .................................................... RAW‬‬‫‪84 .................................... RAW Data Edit‬‬‫‪94 .............................. RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫)‪127 .................... RC Mode (# RC Mode‬‬‫‪95 ............................... Recording Volume‬‬‫‪87 ............................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪89 ............................... Release Lag-Time‬‬‫‪74 ................................................... Reset‬‬‫‪88 .......................................... Reset Lens‬‬‫‪109 ،86 ...............................Reset Protect‬‬‫‪89 .................................... Rls Priority C/S‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪32 .................................‬‬‫‪49 .................................................... S-AF‬‬‫‪49 ............................................. S-AF+MF‬‬‫‪) SCN‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪24 ،20 .............................‬‬‫)‪88 ..................Set Home (P Set Home‬‬‫‪93 ....................................Shading Comp.‬‬‫‪) Share Order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ(‪70 ........................‬‬‫‪91 ،16 ............................................. Sleep‬‬‫‪) Small Target‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ‪46 ........‬‬‫‪) Super Spot AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪48 ..............................................‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪98 ..........................................Test Picture‬‬‫‪82 ............................... Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫‪96 .........................Touch Screen Settings‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪91 ........................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪90 .............................................Video Out‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪93 ،52 .................................................WB‬‬‫‪114 .....................................Wi-Fi settings‬‬‫‪95 ......................... Wind Noise Reduction‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪124 ،14 .............................................‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪124 .............................................. SD‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪73 ....................................... SD‬‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪84 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪60 ..............................w‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪44 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪116 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪67 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪86 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪49 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪35 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪48 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪47 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪88 ،47 .....................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪49 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪49 ................................... (MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪117 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪86 ،70 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪20 ...................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪37 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪20 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪33 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪33 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪33 ................................... (BULB/TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪82 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪54 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ‪34 .........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪34 ................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪68 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪81 ...............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪49 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪45 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪60 ...........................................‬‬‫‪155 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪30 .................................... (%‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪100 ....................................................‬‬‫ﺡ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ < ‪121 ......................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪125 ............................................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪57 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪56 .............................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪109 ......................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪51 .............................................ISO‬‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪99 ،22 .......................................‬‬‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪65 ،47 ،19.................................. INFO‬‬‫ﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪114 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪13 .....................................................‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪103 ،102 ............‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪54 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪129 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪80 ......................(HDR‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪26 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪59 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪93 ..................... (Color Space‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪16 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪69 ......................................................‬‬‫‪73 ........................................... All Erase‬‬‫‪69 ................................................ Erase‬‬‫‪) Erase Selected‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪70 ................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪113 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪19 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪46 ..........................(P‬‬

‫ﻥ‬

‫ﺽ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪56 ...............................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪17 ................................. X‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪125 ،56 ............................................‬‬

‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪106 ،71 ،67...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪68 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪106 ،71 ،67.............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪87 .......... (c/# Menu Display‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ‪18 ..................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪64 .....................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪18 ..........................................‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪127 ........................‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪84 .......................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪87 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪73 ............................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)‪98 ،97 ،18............................(AE Lock‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪50 .....................................................‬‬‫‪AR 156‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪49 .................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪24 ..............................................‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2016.02.‬‬‫‪WD128402‬‬